Canon | EOS-1D Mark IV | User manual | Canon EOS-1D Mark IV User manual

Canon EOS-1D Mark IV User manual
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻛﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻙ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ EOS-1D Mark IV‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ EOS DIGITAL SLR‬ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪ CMOS‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱٦٫۱۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫"‪ "DIGIC 4‬ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫)‪ ۳۹‬ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪) Full HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻛﻳﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪ ۲٦٦‬ﻭ‪(۲٦۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪ ۱۲‬ﻭ‪.(۱۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺿﺎﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﻅﺭ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻷﻱ ﻏﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻠﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﻟﻭ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ "CF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CompactFlash‬ﻭﺗﺷﻳﺭ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ "SD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .SD/SDHC‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﻟﻠﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ‪L6‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E4‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LC-E4‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ EOS‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ )ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻳﺏ(‬
‫)‪ (۲‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (۳‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )‪ (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﻭﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<9‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ ‪ : 8 ،9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻅﻝ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ **( ‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺻﻳﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺻﻳﺣﺔ ﻟﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪) <J‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ >‪ <5‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ >‪ CF <f‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ >‪.SD/SDHC <g‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪.EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪.(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪) My Menu ،(C.Fn‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫‪۲۰۳‬‬
‫‪۲٤۱‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪۳ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ ‪٥ .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ‪۱۰..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۲........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪۱٤......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‪۱٦.................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۲۸.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪۳۲............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪۳۳......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳٤.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪۳٦.............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻛﻬﺎ ‪۳۹..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪٤۰.............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪٤٤.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٤٦........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪٤۹.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪٤۹.........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪٤۹..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪٥۰........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٥۲................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ ‪٥۲................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪٥۲.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪٥۳.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٥٦....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﻳﻥ ‪٥۷................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥۹..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥۹................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪) JPEG‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ(‪٦۳.............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦٤........................................................................................... ISO‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪٦٦............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٦۸.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۷۰ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۷۲ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪۷۳ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪۷۸ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۷۹ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۸۰ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۸۱ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۸۲ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪۸٤ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪۸٦ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪۸۸ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪۹۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪۹۲ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۹٤ ................................................................... (AF‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۹۷ .................................................................. (AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۱۰۰ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۱۰۰ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۰۱ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪۱۰۲ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۰٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪۱۰٦ ...............................................................................(AE‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۸ .....................................................................Shutter‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۱۰ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪۱۱۱ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۲ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۱۳ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪۱۱٤ ....................................................................... (AEB‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱۱٥ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪۱۱٦ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪2‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪۱۱۸ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۱۱۹ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۲۱ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪۱۲٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۲۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۲۹ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪۱۳۰ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۱۳۱ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۱۳۸ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٤۲ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٤۳ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۱٤۳ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪۱٤٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٥۰ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪۱٥۱ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥٦ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٥۷ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۹ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ y‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ( ‪۱٥۹ ...............................................‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ( ‪۱٦۰ ........................................................‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ‪۱٦۱ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦۲ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٦۳ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱٦٥ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺷﻬﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪۱٦۷ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪۱٦۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪۱۷۰ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ J‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۷۲ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪۱۷٤ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۷٦ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۷۹ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۸۰ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۸۰ ...................................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۱۸۱ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۸۲ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪۱۸٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪۱۸٥ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪۱۸۷ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱۹۰ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱۹۲ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۱۹۷ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪۱۹۹ ...................................................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪۲۰۲ .......................................... (DPOF‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۲۰٤ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۲۰٥ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۲۰۸ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Exposure :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪۲۰۸ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Image/Flash exposure/Display :۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‪۲۱٤ ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Autofocus/Drive :۳‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪۲۱۸ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Operation/Others :٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‪۲۲۷ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪۲۳٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ ‪۲۳۷ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪۲۳۸ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪۲٤۰ .......................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫‪۲٤۱‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۲٤۲ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۲٤٤ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲٤٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲٤۷ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪۲٤۸ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۲٤۹ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ‪۲٥٦ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۲٥۷ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ‪۲٦٦ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۲۷۰ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۳۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۳٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲٤۷‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۳۳‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪/‬ﻓﺻﻝ‬
‫‪Í‬ﺹ ‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۷‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۸٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۸٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ(‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۹۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۸۲‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۷۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۷۳‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۷۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۷۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٤۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۳۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫• ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫• ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AF Servo‬‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۹٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۹۷‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۲۳‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۲٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫• ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺷﻬﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪(C.Fn‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۳٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۳۷‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲۳۸‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻗﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻁﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﻟﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻳﺱ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻲ ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻛﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﻯ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺗﺧﻁﻰ ‪ ٪ ۹۹,۹۹‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٪ ۰,۰۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻁﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﺑﺿﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻧﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻗﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺧﺩﺵ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺩ ﻋﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۸‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪.SD‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۳٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٥۳‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫• >‪ <d‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪.(AE‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪) <x‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(۱۸۷ ،۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﺳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬
‫>‪ <I‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٤۳/۱۰٥/۱۱۹ ،۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤۲ ،٤۳‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ )ﺹ ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤۱ ،٤۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <Z‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(۱٤٤ ،٦٤‬‬
‫>‪ <I‬ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٤۳/۱۰٥/۱۱۹‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۲/۱۱۳‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۲٦/٤٤‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫>‪ <y/A‬ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۹۷ ،۱٦۱/۱۱٥ ،٤۳‬‬
‫>‪ <u/S‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۹۷ ،۱٦۱/۹۷ ،٤۳‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۸۰ ،٤٤‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳٤‬‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺯﺭ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱٤۷ ،۱۲۷ ،۹٦ ،۹٥ ،٤۱ ،٤۳‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۲۱‬‬
‫>‪<p‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٤۷ ،۱۲۷ ،۹٦ ،۹٥ ،٤۱‬‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(۱۱۹/۱۰٤‬‬
‫>‪ <W‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪،۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪(۱٤٤ ،۱٤۳ ،۱۲۷‬‬
‫>‪ <y/A‬ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۹۷ ،۱٦۱/۱۱٥‬‬
‫>‪< o‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺹ ‪(۱۰۱/۹٤‬‬
‫>‪<u/S‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۹۷ ،۱٦۱/۹۷‬‬
‫>‪ <Y‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۱۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﺹ ‪(۱۷٥ ،۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳۳ ،۳۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء )ﺹ ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2/E2A‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪ WFT-E2/E2A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۲٫۰٫۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )ﺹ ‪،۱٤۸ ،۱۲۸‬‬
‫‪(۱۹۷/۲٤٦ ،۱٥٦‬‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩ )ﺹ ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪) CF‬ﺹ ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫>‪<x‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۲۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۷٤‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(۱۷۹‬‬
‫>‪ <H‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪/(۱۷٤/۱۷۲‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۷۸ ،۷۲ ،٥۹ ،٥٦‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۱۲۰‬‬
‫>‪ <F‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ )ﻧﻭﻉ ‪) (N3‬ﺹ ‪(۱۱۷‬‬
‫>‪ <Y‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(۳۲‬‬
‫>‪<q/C‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪/‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺹ ‪(۱۹۰/۱۷۰‬‬
‫>‪ <Z‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺹ ‪(۱۷۱‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫>‪<p‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫>‪ <i‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪<1‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ‪RAW‬‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <z‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <w‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪ <H‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ‪۱‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ‪۱/۳‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪-‬‬‫)‪(SEL AF ،SEL [ ] ،[ - - ] AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ *(‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪-‬‬‫)‪(SEL HP ،SEL [ ] ،[ - - ] HP‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﻕ‪:‬ﺙ(‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ )‪(- -‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪-‬‬‫)‪(SEL AF ،SEL [ ] ،[ - - ] AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ *(‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪-‬‬‫)‪(SEL HP ،SEL [ ] ،[ - - ] HP‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ )‪(- - - -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪:X‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪:Z‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ p‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪nb m c x z‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ W‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻅﻝ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺿﻭء ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ I‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )] * [(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪۱‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫‪RAW 1‬‬
‫‪ K1‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪RAW‬‬
‫‪ 61‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺍﻣﺗﻼء‪ ،‬ﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ*‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ*‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫*‪ :۱‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WFT-E2/E2A‬‬
‫*‪ :۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :۳‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WFT-E2/E2A‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪/FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <H‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :X‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ P‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ S‬ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ V‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ W‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۳-۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ p‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪nbm c x z‬‬
‫>‪ <2‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫>‪ <Y‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ]‪[8C.Fn II -10: INFO. button when shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۰-۲‬ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO.‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۱۷‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E4‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E4‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E4‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ )‪(۲‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﺑﺔ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﺯﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺧﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺯﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻟﻔﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ )ﺃ( ﺃﻭ )ﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺿﻲء ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ )‪.(٪۱۰۰/٪۸۰/٪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻭﺳﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻭ‪ ۱۱۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ٥۰/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻭ‪ ۸٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻭﻗﺻﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﺻﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻧﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻭ‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <PERFORMANCE‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍء( ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺿﺭ( ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺿﺭ( ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲٤۷‬ﻭﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪) CB-570‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ )ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ >‪) <DC IN‬ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(( ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﺎﺋﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﺎﺋﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻼ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﺎﺋﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻔﺭﻍ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲٤‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ ﺳﺎﻟﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﺎﺋﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ >‪) <CAL/CHARGE‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺷﺣﻥ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<CALIBRATE‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ٍ ۱۰‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ( ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ >‪) <CAL/CHARGE‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺷﺣﻥ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ )ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻗﻝ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﻗﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ >‪ <2h‬ﻭ>‪ <4h‬ﻭ>‪ <10h‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻗﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ )ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ( ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ >‪ <10h‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻳﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺿﺕ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﻭ‪ ۱۰٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ ۰‬ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﻭ‪ ۱۰٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺿﺕ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺿﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ >‪<CAL/CHARGE‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺷﺣﻥ((‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﺍﺫﻫﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ >‪) <CAL/CHARGE‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺷﺣﻥ((‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E4‬‬
‫ﺧﺻﻳﺻﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻣُﺻﻣﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺗﻬﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺿﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻠﺏ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻣﺳﺣﺔ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E4‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻕ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ >‪) <5‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫>‪<J‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J/1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺭﺽ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ >‪ <2>/<J/1‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Recording ...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪۷۰ – ۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ٍ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪٥۰ – ٦۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪٪٥۰‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪۲۰ – ٤۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪٪٥۰‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪۱۰ – ۱۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪۱–۹‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۷۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱٥۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ۱۲۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ CIPA‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ 6) [6 Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲٤۷‬‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﻓﺗﺣﺗﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻳﻬﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ٥٦‬ﻭ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻠﺏ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬً ﺎ ﻟﻙ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﺭﺯ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ > < ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺳُ ﻣﻙ ﻧﻭﻋﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ )‪ّ CF (CompactFlash‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ DMA (UDMA) CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ UDMA CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [2Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻧﺳﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻳﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ‪) ۰۰۰۱‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﻌﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(٥۰‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻣﺳﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <f‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <g‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪.EF-S‬‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۰‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪) Eg‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻟﻑ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻙ ﻭﻣﺭﻓﻘﻳﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻗﺩﻣﻳﻙ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۲٥‬‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )‪.(9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺭﻑ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻼ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (۲‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ >‪ <9‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺛﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ((‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [5Format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ(( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (۲‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ )‪ (۱‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷ ،۱٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪) ON/OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪<2‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺅﺧﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ >‪.<5> <6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪۱‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪۳‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫‪2/1‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪4/3‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪7/6/5‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻕ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻧﻙ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(( ﻭ]‪) [5Format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) ۱‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫‪P / (٥ - ۱) O / I / U / Y / R / E / W / Q‬‬
‫)‪PC-1 - 5 / (۱۰۰۰۰ - ۲٥۰۰‬‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫‪Custom WB registration‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫‪) WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ‪) B/A/M/G‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‪ ۹ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :WB-BKT‬ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ‪) B/A‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ( ﻭﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ‪M/G‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۳±‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪Adobe RGB / sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) QPortrait /‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) UFaithful‬ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) WUser Def. 1, 2, 3‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪(۳ ،۲ ،۱‬‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6 ،5 ،4 ،3‬‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫‪۷۱-٦٦‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪) JPEG quality‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪(JPEG‬‬
‫‪) Image size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪61 / K1 / 1‬‬
‫‪6/5/4/3‬‬
‫)→ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪٤۸‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ( ‪۸) 8 sec. /‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) 2 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ( ‪٤) 4 sec. /‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪) Hold /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪Release shutter without‬‬
‫‪) card‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Review time‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪External Speedlite‬‬
‫‪) control‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫‪) Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪Flash C.Fn /‬‬
‫‪) settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ( ‪Clear all Speedlite /‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn’s‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪(Speedlite‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪) ۱‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪) Protect images‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫‪) Print order‬ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪۱۹۹‬‬
‫‪) Image copy‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫‪External media backup‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪WFT-E2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ( ‪ IIA/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪) WFT-E2/E2A‬ﻛﻠﺗﺎﻫﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫‪) Highlight alert‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫‪) AF point display‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ( ‪) Brightness / RGB‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪(RGB /‬‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) Enlarge display‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫‪) Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(6‬‬
‫‪) image 1‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪ ۱۰) images 10 /‬ﺻﻭﺭ( ‪images 100 /‬‬
‫)‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪) Date /‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ‪) Folder /‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ‪) Movies /‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Stills‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) ۱‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) 1min.‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪) 2 min./‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ( ‪ ٤) 4 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ( ‪.min 8 /‬‬
‫)‪ ۸‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ( ‪ ۱٥) 15 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪ ۳۰) 30 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Record func+media/‬‬
‫‪) folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ‪Auto switch /‬‬
‫‪) media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪) Rec. to multiple/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [Record/play‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ]‪) [Playback‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪u / g / f‬‬
‫]‪) [Folder‬ﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‬
‫‪File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Manual reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫‪) File name setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺭﻳﺩ( ‪) User setting 1 /‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪/ (۱‬‬
‫‪) User setting 2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪(۲‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) On zD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪) On D /‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫‪LCD brightness‬‬
‫)ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ )ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫‪) LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‬
‫‪NTSC / PAL‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺃﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪۲٤۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ / k/LV z‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ / (AF‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ / Live View/Movie func. set.‬ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ /‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ /‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪/‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)→ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪( ٤۸‬‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) ۳‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫‪Save/load settings on‬‬
‫‪) media‬ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ(‬
‫‪Regist/apply basic settings‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫‪Copyright information‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪) Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‬
‫‪) Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪۲۳۸‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ‪ /‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ‪ /‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ‪ /‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪) Clean now /‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ( ‪Clean /‬‬
‫‪) manually‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪WFT-E2‬‬
‫‪) WFT settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(WFT‬‬
‫‪ IIA/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪) WFT-E2/E2A‬ﻛﻠﺗﺎﻫﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱‬‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Image/ :۲‬‬
‫‪Flash exposure/Display‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Autofocus/ :۳‬‬
‫‪) Drive‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Operation/ :٤‬‬
‫‪) Others‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‬
‫‪Clear all Custom Functions‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫)‪) (C.Fn‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪C.Fn setting register/‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪) apply‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪۲۲۷‬‬
‫‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫‪۲۳٥‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫‪) My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۲۳۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ]‪ 2) [2 Image size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪[Record func.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (٥۷‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]‪ 5) [5Record func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Rec.‬‬
‫‪) [separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [LV z/k set.‬ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪6Live View/Movie func.‬‬
‫‪ 6) [set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ )ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ 6) [6 Video system‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.(K‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[LanguageK‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪) (K‬ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [FORMAT‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ]‪ [f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭﺗﺷﻳﺭ ]‪ [g‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[g‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺩﻣﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[g‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ]‪) [Low level format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ( ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪Low level‬‬
‫‪) [format‬ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ( >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪ ،<X‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Beep‬ﺻﻔﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Beep‬ﺻﻔﻳﺭ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Clear all‬‬
‫‪) [camera settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪) Shooting mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫)‪) d (Program AE‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Automatic selection‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪) AF point‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫‪) Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) q‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) u‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Exposure compensation‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) ۰‬ﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪Flash exposure‬‬
‫‪) compensation‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪) ۰‬ﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪External Speedlite control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪) Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Image size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) 3‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪) JPEG quality‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪(JPEG‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫)‪)P(Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪Correction data/‬‬
‫‪) retained‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ(‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪Registered setting‬‬
‫‪) Custom WB data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪) retained‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪Registered setting‬‬
‫‪) Personal WB‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪) retained‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪) WB correction‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Preset code‬ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫‪) File name setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫‪) Information retained‬ﺗﻡ‬
‫‪Copyright information‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Erased‬ﻣﺳﺢ(‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪Release shutter‬‬
‫‪) without card‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) Review time‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‬
‫‪) Highlight alert‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ(‬
‫‪) AF point display‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Registered AF point‬‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪) Enlarge display‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫‪ ۱) 1 min.‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) 2 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ(‬
‫‪) Center‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ(‬
‫‪) Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪(w/6‬‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪OnzD‬‬
‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ( ‪) All image‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪) Basic settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Unchanged‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪Display from My Menu‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪Unchanged‬‬
‫‪Custom Functions‬‬
‫)ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪10 images‬‬
‫)‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪LV z/k‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫‪Exposure simulation‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫)ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪Movie- recording‬‬
‫‪) size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬
‫‪Sound recording‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪۱۰۸۰×۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪ ۱٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪WFT-E2/‬‬
‫‪) E2A‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻛﻠﺗﺎﻫﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <u‬ﻛﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ >‪ CF <f‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ >‪.SD <g‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﺎ ‪ CF‬ﻭ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ(‪(9) .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ z‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : A‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫‪ : S‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ 5) [5Record func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ )]‪)) [Record/play] ([Playback‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۷‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) Auto switch media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ([‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ]‪[Rec. to multiple‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Record func+media/folder sel.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Record‬‬
‫‪) [func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Record func.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Auto switch media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(٥۹‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ ،K1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rec. to multiple‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) RAW+JPEG‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.(RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Auto switch media‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ g‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.u‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Rec. to multiple‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﻲ ‪ CF‬ﻭ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Card* full‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Auto switch media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(RAW‬ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫‪) JPEG‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ‪ 6/5/4/3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪،61/K1/1‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ(‪(9) .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ z‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ 61/K1/1‬ﻭ‪6/5/4/3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۷‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Image size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Image size‬‬
‫)ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ "‪) ***M‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ( **** ‪x‬‬
‫****" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫]****[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪5+61‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]–[ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۷‬ﻓﺳﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <p‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪) (Medium RAW) K1 ،(RAW) 1 :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬
‫‪) (Small RAW) 61 ،(RAW‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪) (Large) 3 ،JPEG ،(RAW‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‪4 ،‬‬
‫)‪) (Medium 1‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪) (Medium 2) 5 ،(1‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪) (Small) 6 ،(2‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫)ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪16.0M‬‬
‫‪ A3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫***‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪12.4M‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪٤٫٤‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪8.4M‬‬
‫‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪۳٫٤‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4.0M‬‬
‫‪ A5‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪۱٫۹‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪16.0M‬‬
‫‪ A3‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪۲۲٫۲‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪3+1‬‬
‫‪16.0M+16.0M‬‬
‫‪٥٫٦+۲۲٫۲‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪4+1‬‬
‫‪16.0M+12.4M‬‬
‫‪٤٫٤+۲۲٫۲‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪5+1‬‬
‫‪16.0M+8.4M‬‬
‫‪۳٫٤+۲۲٫۲‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪6+1‬‬
‫‪16.0M+4.0M‬‬
‫‪۱٫۹+۲۲٫۲‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪۱٤٫۸‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪٥٫٦+۱٤٫۸‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪٤٫٤+۱٤٫۸‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪۳٫٤+۱٤٫۸‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪۱٫۹+۱٤٫۸‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪۹٫۹‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪٥٫٦+۹٫۹‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪٤٫٤+۹٫۹‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪۳٫٤+۹٫۹‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪۱٫۹+۹٫۹‬‬
‫***‬
‫*** )***(‬
‫‪K1‬‬
‫‪3+K1‬‬
‫‪9.0M‬‬
‫‪4+K1‬‬
‫‪5+K1‬‬
‫‪9.0M+8.4M‬‬
‫‪6+K1‬‬
‫‪9.0M+4.0M‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪9.0M+16.0M‬‬
‫‪9.0M+12.4M‬‬
‫‪3+61‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪4.0M‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ A5‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫‪4.0M+16.0M‬‬
‫‪4+61‬‬
‫‪4.0M+12.4M‬‬
‫‪5+61‬‬
‫‪4.0M+8.4M‬‬
‫‪6+61‬‬
‫‪4.0M+4.0M‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪۸‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺃﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ (UDMA) Ultra DMA‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K1‬ﺃﻭ ‪) 61‬ﻳﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪.(RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۲ - ۲‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :۲) [2: Strong‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ "‪ "99‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ۹۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺍﻣﺗﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ "‪"buSY‬‬
‫)ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ )ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺭﺟً ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٦۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .UDMA CF‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺃﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٦۱‬‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪) JPEG‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ( ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪.6/5/4/3‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [JPEG quality‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪.(JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[JPEG quality‬‬
‫)ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ،(JPEG‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ )ﻭﻗﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،۱۰ - ٦‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪ .<i‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ،٥ - ۱‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻗﻠﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء( ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(9) .<Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ISO 100-12800‬‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ "‪ ،"A‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪100 - 400‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫‪400 - 1600‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻠﺑﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎء‬
‫‪H1 ،1600 - 12800‬‬
‫‪H3 ،H2‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳ - ۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :۱) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ‪) ISO 200 - 12800‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﺣﺑﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ )ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H3‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) (ISO‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۰۸‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻥ ‪ (L) ISO 50‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(H3) ISO 102400‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ "‪) ISO "A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ ،"A‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ISO 100 - 12800‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪*ISO 400‬‬
‫* ﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﻭ >‪ <d‬ﻭﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪.400-1600‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) (ISO‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۰۸‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ In d/s/f/a‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،L‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪.100-12800‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ‪ ISO 400‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪.٤۰۰‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪8) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،(ISO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪8) [8C.Fn I -12: Set shutter speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱۲-۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) (shutter‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۱۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪[8C.Fn I -13: Set aperture value‬‬
‫]‪ 8) range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۱۱‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn I -8: Safety shift‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۸-۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۱۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ :۱) 1: Enable (Tv/Av‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )‪ [((Tv/Av‬ﺃﻭ ])‪2: Enable (ISO speed‬‬
‫)‪ :۲‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،[((ISO‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ 1) [1Picture Style‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) P Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Q Portrait‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻟﻁﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳً ﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﺳﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٦۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) R Landscape‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻬﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) S Neutral‬ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ(‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﻔﺿﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻁﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) U Faithful‬ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﻔﺿﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ٥۲۰۰‬ﻛﻠﻔﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻁﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) V Monochrome‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) W User Def. 1-3‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪(۳-۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ]‪) Portrait‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ([ ﺃﻭ ]‪Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ([ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ *( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۷۰‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺭﻑ ﻣﻥ ِﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ -‬ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ( ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :۰‬ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ :۷+‬ﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬
‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ :٤-‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :٤+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻔﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ :N‬ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Ye‬ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Or‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻗﻁﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺟﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﻼ(‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]‪[User Def. 1‬‬
‫)ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ (۱‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ (۲‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 3‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪.(۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫]*‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ*(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.٦۹-٦۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]* ‪[User Def.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺧﺻﺹ *(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﻘﻕ‬
‫ﺗُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ (WB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻼﺋﻡ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ(‪(9) .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ z‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻅﻝ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﻔﻕ‪ ،‬ﻏﺭﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻙ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻔﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫‪۷۰۰۰ - ۳۰۰۰‬‬
‫‪٥۲۰۰‬‬
‫‪۷۰۰۰‬‬
‫‪٦۰۰۰‬‬
‫‪۳۲۰۰‬‬
‫‪٤۰۰۰‬‬
‫‪٦۰۰۰‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰۰۰ - ۲۰۰۰‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰۰۰ - ۲٥۰۰‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ً‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ 1) [1White balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) Personal WB‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]*‪) [PC-‬ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ*(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) Personal WB‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) Personal WB‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]*‪) [PC-‬ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ*(‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﻡ )ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ( ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Custom WB regist.‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Custom WB‬‬
‫‪) [regist.‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫>‪ ،<*O‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Record and register image‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪Record and‬‬
‫‪) [register image‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻭﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ] * [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪) <O‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ → ] * [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺁﻧﻔﺎ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ‪.‬‬
‫→ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪Correct WB may not be‬‬
‫‪) [obtained with the selected image‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪) ٪۱۸‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ( ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۷٤ ،۷۳‬ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻊ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ "ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ"‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register image on card‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Custom WB regist.‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪Register image‬‬
‫‪) [on card‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<y‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۷٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪،(٦۷‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Set as white balance‬ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪Set as white‬‬
‫‪) [balance‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ >‪<*O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ >‪.<*O‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪ .<O‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﻡ )ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ( ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Edit caption‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Edit caption‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<H‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺭﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺳﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫>‪.<*O‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺭﻗﻣﻳًﺎ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻔﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﺭﻓﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(9) .<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ z‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ >‪.<P‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<P‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ۲٥۰۰‬ﺃﻟﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰۰۰۰‬ﺃﻟﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺃﻟﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ >‪ <P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪ 1) [1White balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪WB SHIFT/‬‬
‫‪) [BKT‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪G1 ،A2 :‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ "‪"SHIFT‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪ <u‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۳±‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۳±‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "■"‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "■■■" )‪ ۳‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[WB SHIFT/BKT‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .۱ :‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭ‪ .۲‬ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪(B‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .۳‬ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .۱‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭ‪ .۲‬ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ (M‬ﻭ‪ .۳‬ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ )‪.(G‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻳﻘﻝ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ "‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ُﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪8C.Fn II -4: Auto‬‬
‫‪8) [Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :٤ - ۲‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting‬‬
‫‪) [Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:٤ - ۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۰٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪8) [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:٤-۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪ :۳) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺗﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺗﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :۳) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﻗﺻﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺗﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻭ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Peripheral illumin. correct.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Peripheral‬‬
‫‪) [illumin. correct.‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪Correction‬‬
‫‪) [data available‬ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺻﻠﺢ ﻟﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲٥‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ( ﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻗﻠﻳﻼ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Record func+media/folder sel.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Record‬‬
‫‪) [func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Create folder‬‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ "‪ "100EOS1D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺑﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﻣﺗﺑﻭﻋً ﺎ ﺑﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۹۹‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪ .(۹۹۹۹ - ۰۰۰۱‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۸۹‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ‪.۹۹۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺷﺊ ﻣﺟﻠ ًﺩﺍ ﺟﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ "‪ ."DCIM‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺃﻧﺷﺊ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ "‪ "100ABC_D‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۹ - ۱۰۰‬ﻣﺗﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺛﻝ "‪ "100ABC_D‬ﻭ "‪ "100W_XYZ‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۸۸‬ﻭﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ "‪) "User setting1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ ،(۱‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ "‪) "User setting2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ ،(۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺛﺎﻝ( ‪BE3B0001.JPG‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [File name setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪File name‬‬
‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Change User setting‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪Change User‬‬
‫*‪) [setting‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) User setting1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪،(۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪User setting2‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ ،(۲‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<H‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺳﺗﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [File name‬ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪) User setting2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪،(۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ "*** )ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ( ‪ +‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ "*** ‪ +‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ" ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) User setting2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ (۲‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫"‪K1 ،4 = "***M‬‬
‫"‪1 ،3 = "*** L‬‬
‫"‪61 ،6 = "***S‬‬
‫"‪5 = "*** N‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (JPEG‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ "‪".JPG‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ"‪".CR2‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ"‪".MOV‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) User setting2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ ،(۲‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ "_"‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻳﺷﺑﻪ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺑﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۹۹‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫)ﻣﺛﺎﻝ( ‪BE3B0001.JPG‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [File numbering‬ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ ،(g→f‬ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۹۹۹۹‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۹۹‬ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪Card B (g‬‬
‫)‪Card A (f‬‬
‫‪XXXX0052‬‬
‫‪XXXX0051‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫‪Card A‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXXX0052‬‬
‫‪XXXX0051‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Auto Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ ،(g → f‬ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،۰۰۰۱‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪Card B (g‬‬
‫)‪Card A (f‬‬
‫‪100X0001‬‬
‫‪XXXX0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫‪Card A‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXXX0001‬‬
‫‪XXXX0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Manual Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺑﺩء ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺑﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪.۰۰۰۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺱ ﻭﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۹۹۹‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،۹۹۹۹‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺭﻯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ .Exif‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Copyright information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) [information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪Enter‬‬
‫‪) [author’s name‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) ،[Enter copyright details‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<H‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺭﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺳﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Display copyright info.‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ]‪[Author‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ( ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ]‪) [Copyright‬ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Delete copyright information‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ]‪) [Author‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ( ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪) [Copyright‬ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،Adobe RGB ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ .(Exif 2.21) ۲٫۰‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.(Exif 2.21) ۲٫۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ "_"(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ICC‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ۳۹‬ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ٍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ >‪ <g‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪(9) .‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫‪) One-Shot AF : X‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪ : Z‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻳﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﻭء ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻅﺭ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [2 Beep‬ﺻﻔﻳﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗُﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ "ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ".‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻐﻁﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺑﺗﻌﺩ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۹۷‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻭﺗﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻳﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <9‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪) SEL :‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ(‬
‫‪) SEL AF‬ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ .(AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪.<9‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn III -10: Selectable AF point‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۰- ۳‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،((AF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱۱‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۲۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn III -8: AF expansion w/selected pt‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۸- ۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۲۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪[8C.Fn III -6: Lens AF stop button function‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :٦- ۳‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [7: Spot AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،((AF‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ‪) C.Fn III -11-1/2‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) (۲/۱-۱۱- ۳‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۲٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪) C.Fn III -6-6‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) (٦-٦- ۳‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ EOS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،EOS-1D Mark IV‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ f/2.8‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪f/2.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻳﻥ‬
‫]‪[Manual selection‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ )ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪ [Automatic selection‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺷﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ‪f/4 :‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ‪ :‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪ f/5.6‬ﺃﻭ ‪f/8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،f/5.6‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،f/8‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF24mm f/2.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،EF28mm f/2.8‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ )ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ ،f/4‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪.f/2.8‬‬
‫‪،EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM ،EF17-40mm f/4L USM‬‬
‫‪،EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4X II‬‬
‫‪،EF200mm f/2L IS USM + Extender EF2X II‬‬
‫‪،EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4X II‬‬
‫‪EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4X II‬‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫>‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻌﻛﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺱ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺹ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻧﺎﻁﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )‪) (One-Shot AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۹٥‬ﺣﺩﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺩﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (۲‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۹۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻧﻳﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪(9) .‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ : u‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : o‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ : p‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻌﻳﻥ ‪ o‬ﻭ‪ ،p‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ : k‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ : l‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 6‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ >‪ .<u‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ >‪ .<u/p/o‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ ،<o‬ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪(9) .‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ >‪ <k‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪ <k‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ : k‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ : l‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻐﻠﻕ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۱۱۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ >‪ <l‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۹٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(9) .<Q‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ :q‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ :w‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ :r‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ :e‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫‪q‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٪۱۳٫٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪r‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺟﺯء ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪۳٫۸‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -7: Spot meter. link to AF point‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۷- ۱‬ﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ [(AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪[1: Enable (use active AF point‬‬
‫)‪ :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) ((AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،(۲۱۰‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ r‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(8) .<I‬‬
‫ﻭﺟّ ﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <Z‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <S‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<O‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -7: Spot meter. link to AF point‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۷- ۱‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ((AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪1: Enable (use active‬‬
‫)‪ :۱) [AF point‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) ((AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪،(۲۱۰‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫* ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺣﻘﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻳﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻭﻣﺿﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ "‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺗﺭ ‪) ND‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۹۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۲۲‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺿﻲء ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ "ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪ .shutter‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺕ ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﺭ‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<s‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻥ "‪ "8000‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺳﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ "‪ "125‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱/۱۲٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ""‪"15‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ f/‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﻗﻡ‪ f/‬ﺃﻗﻝ )ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ""‪ "30‬ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ )‪ f/‬ﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ""‪ "8000‬ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ )‪ f/‬ﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻗﻠﺕ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﻗﻡ‪ f/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺗﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ ،<J‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5/6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪.<a‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :٤-۲‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۸۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ )ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ )ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ( ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ >‪.<d/s/f‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<J‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ )‪ (9‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <s‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)>‪ <a‬ﺃﻭ >‪.(<C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :٤-۲‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۸۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺅﺛﺭً ﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺹ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5/6‬‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪h‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳±‬ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫"‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ("‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ >‪<W‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﻭ>‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪(9) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <h‬ﻭ"‪ "0.0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ‪ "1.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ>‪ <N‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ .(AEB‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ ،(AEB‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."0.0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ ،(AEB‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <w‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<6‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <p‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ >‪ <k‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ ،<l‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ۱۰‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ "ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(9) .<w‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <w‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۹۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪erw‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<g‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .shutter‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<buLb‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<buLb‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<5/6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ :۲ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ :۳ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﺷﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -1: Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ :۱ - ۲‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :۱) [1: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[2: On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪/(9‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪ EOS‬ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ N3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻔﺿﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ( ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ 8) [8C.Fn III -17: Mirror lockup‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۷ - ۳‬ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ :۲) [2: Enable: Down with SET‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۲٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻭﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ >‪ <2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ ،[۱‬ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ ،[۲‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻳﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﺷﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺭﻕ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ )ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺗﺎ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ِ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [2: Enable: Down with SET‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <k‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<l‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﻬﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﻳﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.۱۲٤-۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :٤-۲‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۸۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Canon Speedlit‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻓﺋﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۱/۳۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ۱/۲٥۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ ۱/۱۲٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ۱/۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻠﻭﻟﺏ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺱ ﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻗﻁﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻗﻁﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺟﻬ ًﺩﺍ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ۲٥۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ 580EX II‬ﻭ‪ 430EX II‬ﻭ‪(270EX‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[External Speedlite control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Flash function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪Flash function‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻭ]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]‪) [Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪[Shutter sync.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪(.(Shutter‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]‪) [Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫]]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺭﻏﺑﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [output‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )‪ ۱/۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(۱/۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [MULTI flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ( ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺭﻏﺑﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [output‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪[Frequency‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ( ﻭ]‪) [Flash count‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺑﺄﻧﻔﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [TTL‬ﻭ]‪[AutoExtFlash‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ،[Man.ExtFlash‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Shutter sync.‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪(Shutter‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1st curtain‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻏﻠﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺛﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻛﺎﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻣﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Hi-speed‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬
‫‪ .shutter‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) FEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳ ٍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪) FEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۱۹‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺱ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﺭﻓﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .Speedlite‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Wireless setting‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳ ٍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱/٥۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ۱/٦۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺳﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﻧﺑًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻊ ‪) C.Fn II -5‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) (٥- ۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۲۱٥‬ﻭﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪) C.Fn II -7‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) (۷- ۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٦‬‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۰٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ]‪C.Fn-0:‬‬
‫‪) [Distance indicator display‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۰‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Flash metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[TTL‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﺹ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٪۱۸‬ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <a‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<f‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪.٪۱۸‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(8) .<I‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﺣﺎﺫﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺓ "ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪".‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺳﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ( ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱٤۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Live View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Live View/‬‬
‫‪) [Movie func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [LV z/k set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[LV z/k set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ "‪ "LV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Stills‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Stills‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<5/6‬‬
‫‪z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.(۱۳۸-۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.۱٤۰-۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪.٪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻭﺯﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺗﺎ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪shutter‬‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺻﻭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF) (d‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEB‬‬
‫‪ :g‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ :E‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫• ‪ :c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻗﻭﻱ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Expo. simulation: Enable‬ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn IV -15: Add aspect ratio information‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱٥- ٤‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٦‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ ٦×٦‬ﺳﻡ ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥×٦‬ﺳﻡ ﻭ‪ ٥×٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۳٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪ <g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ ،<g‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ )ﻛﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﻙ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ(‬
‫>‪<o> <y> <Z> <O‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( >‪ <A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ۷۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ۲۷۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ۲۳۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪۷۳/‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﻭ‪ ٥۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪[5Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(٥۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫)ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.(۱۷۱-۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫‪3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[Live View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۳۷-۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ]‪u) [uLive mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (۱‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،(۲‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫• ‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )‪(g‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ( ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( )‪(E‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [1Custom WB regist.‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﺃﻭ ]‪2Dust‬‬
‫‪) [Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Save/load settings on media‬ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Regist/apply basic settings‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ]‪) [7Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ( ﺃﻭ ]‪7Clear all camera‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﻭ]‪uLive‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۳۲‬ﻭ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪ u : c‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪d :‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪c :‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ >‪<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻁﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫>‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<f‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺷﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻣًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ > < ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻬﺗﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻭﺑﻌﻳﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺑﺗﻌﺩ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺗﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪f :‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۹٥‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻅﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪.<9‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<o‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء )‪ ،(9‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(.(AF‬‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﻘﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<MF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<u‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻛﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻅﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [6LCD brightness‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ>‪<E‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪) <E‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ >‪ <E‬ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫)ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.(۲۰۷-۲۰٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:٤-۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۸۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪) [3: Disabl‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺗﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻭ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ۸ CF‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD Speed‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪" ٦‬‬
‫" ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻝ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪) 1080‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۲٥‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Live View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Live View/‬‬
‫‪) [Movie func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [LV z/k set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪.(z/k‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[LV z/k set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪ ،(z/k‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ "‪ "LV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ]‪[Movie rec. size‬‬
‫)ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱٥۱‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﻧﺎﻉ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻉ ﻛﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ >‪ ،<a‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ >‪ ،<a‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.(۱۳۸-۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<I‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ (AE‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <A‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۱۱٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ .۱۲۸۰۰-۱۰۰‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]‪) [Highest ISO speed‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [H1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [H2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [H3‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۰۸‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Lowest ISO speed‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[L‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۱٤۸‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﻭ >‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <Z‬ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱٤٦‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ )‪ ۱/۳۰ (۱/٦۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱/٤۰۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺳﻡ "ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ"‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ >‪ <Q‬ﻭﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻬﺗﺯ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱/۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱/۱۲٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺑﺩﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺍﻧﺳﻳﺎﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ISO 100-12800‬‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪.۱/۳‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )‪ ،(A‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪) .ISO 100-12800‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed‬‬
‫‪) [range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(.(۲۰۸‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Highest ISO speed‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [H1‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ (ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [H2‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO 51200‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [H3‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 102400‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۳-۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Lowest ISO speed‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [L‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ (ISO 50‬ﻓﻲ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳-۱‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [L‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ :۳-۲‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۱٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻥ ‪.ISO 200‬‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [5Record func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۷‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ >‪ CF <f‬ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ >‪ .SD <g‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪[Rec. separately‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Playback‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱٥۳‬ﻭ‪.۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺭﺃ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۹‬ﻭ‪.۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪.OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻧﺎﻉ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻉ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻲ ‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ( ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪) IN‬ﺩﺧﻝ( ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ ﺳﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ "ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ" )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱٥٦‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (Exif‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ۲٫۰۷ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ]‪[۱۰۸۰x۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ۹۲۰,۰۰۰‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ]‪ [۱۲۸۰x۷۲۰‬ﻭ‪ ۳۱۰,۰۰۰‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ]‪.[٦٤۰x٤۸۰‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)‪(d‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻗﻭﻱ‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :F‬ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫• ‪ : d‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫• ‪ : c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫• ‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ >‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻉ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (٥۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Auto switch media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Rec. to multiple‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Playback‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻥ ﺗُﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ‪ .UDMA‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <k‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ >‪) <u‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺯﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <W‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪) <o‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ <O‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪) [u (Face detection) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ((‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[6‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[Live View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۳۷-۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ]‪) [uLive mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (l۱‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،(m۲‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ]****‪ [****x‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [9‬ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪)9‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[Movie rec. size‬‬
‫)ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [6Video system‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪ : [۱۰۸۰×۱۹۲۰‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪.(Full HD‬‬
‫]‪ : [۷۲۰×۱۲۸۰‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪.(HD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.٤:۳‬‬
‫]‪[٤۸۰×٦٤۰‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪ : [8] [6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ‪) NTSC‬ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [7] [5‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ‪) PAL‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﻥ ﻭﺃﺳﺗﺭﺍﻟﻳﺎ ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[4‬‬
‫* ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:4 ,25.00 :5 ,29.97 :6 :‬‬
‫‪50.00 :7 ,59.94 :8 ,23.976‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪۱۰۸۰×۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪654‬‬
‫‪۷۲۰×۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۳۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۳۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱٦٥‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) .<I‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻲ ‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ( ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪) IN‬ﺩﺧﻝ( ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [1Custom WB regist.‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﺃﻭ ]‪2Dust‬‬
‫‪) [Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Save/load settings on media‬ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Regist/apply basic settings‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ]‪) [7Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ( ﺃﻭ ]‪7Clear all camera‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﺗﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻧﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ( ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪) .‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ِ‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ (.‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻅﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱٤۸‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺫﻭ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻳﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺿﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ( ﺑﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۰۷-۲۰٥‬‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺩﻧﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ )ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺳﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻧﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫>‪) <E‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <E‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱۷۱‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) INFO‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۷۱-۱۷۰‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ +‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪/shutter‬ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫>‪<P‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ >‪ <k‬ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ >‪ <D‬ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫>‪ <C/B/A‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ >‪ .<4/5/6/7/8‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [4Highlight alert‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [4AF point disp.‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪[4Histogram‬‬
‫)ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ(‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺭﺳﻣًﺎ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳًﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫)ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺗﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺳﻁﻭﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪[RGB‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺷﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ y‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳُﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<y‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <y‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫‪Í‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪[4Image jump w/6‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،(w/6‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ]‪1 image‬‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ۱۰) 10 images/‬ﺻﻭﺭ(‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰۰) 100 images‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪) Date/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) Folder‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‪) Movies/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪Stills/‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ([‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭ]‪) [Stills‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱,٥‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<y‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪4Enlarge‬‬
‫‪) [display‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enlarge from selected AF point‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ >‪ ،<g‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Enlarge from selected AF point‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ(‬
‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ ،C.Fn III -8-1/2/3‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪°۰→ °۲۷۰ → °۹۰ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [5Auto rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪(zD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۸۲‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫]‪) [5Auto rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.(zD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۷۱ ،۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ )‪(Full HD 1920×1080‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ )‪ (HD 1280×720‬ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ ،HDMI IN‬ﻓﻠﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻘﺭﺹ ﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱٦۹-۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ PDF‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺳﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪ZoomBrowser‬‬
‫‪ ،EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MOV‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪<1s‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﻘﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ .<5‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫”‪) mm’ SS‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ‪ ۹‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۷۱ ،۱۷۰‬ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺷﻬﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ] [ )ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺩﺍ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [7‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑـ ]‪ ،([X‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻓﺎ ً‬
‫ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ZoomBrowser EX/‬‬
‫‪) ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [ Slide show‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [All images/Movies/Stills‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) jAll images‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪kMovies/‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) zStills/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ([‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Folder/Date‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪[nFolder‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [iDate‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ >‪ ،< z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪) jAll images‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) nFolder‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) iDate‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪) zStills‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﻱ ]‪[Play time‬‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Play time‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺩء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪[Loading image...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ (...‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ‪.۱۷۱-۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺻﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱٦٥‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ>‪.<q/C‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ >‪.<q/C‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺭ(‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ )ﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺑﻁﺭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [6Video system‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻭﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻁﻝ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ >‪ <q/C‬ﻭ>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫‪ J‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<H‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <K‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<H‬ﻭﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪3Protect‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪All images‬‬
‫‪) [in folder‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪All‬‬
‫‪) [images on card‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Clear all images‬‬
‫‪) [in folder‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Clear all images on card‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪ J‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۰‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <H‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [3Protect images‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱۷۹‬ﻓﺳﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn IV -9: H button function‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۹-٤‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ (H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ Protect:) 1: Record memo‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ( )ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪[(Disabled :‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ :hold) 2: Play memo‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ( )ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪) [(Record memo :‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<H‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪3Protect‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ]‪) [Select images‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ WAV‬ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<H‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‪[Recording memo...‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،(...‬ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ > < ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn IV -9: H button function‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۹-٤‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ (H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ hold:) 2: Play memo‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ( )ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪[(Record memo :‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۳۱‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪8C.Fn IV -9: H button‬‬
‫‪) [function‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۹-٤‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ (H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪hold:) 2: Play memo‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ( )ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪[(Record memo :‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۳۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۰٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻋﻼﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<H‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<H‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱۷۹‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Image copy‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Image copy‬‬
‫)ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪5Record func+media/‬‬
‫‪) [folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ( ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Record/play‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )]‪) ([Playback‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <y‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<H‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<H‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Create folder‬‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sel.n‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ(‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺳﺦ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [All image‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪) .‬ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪Skip image and] :‬‬
‫‪) [continue‬ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ( ]‪) [Replace existing image‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ( ]‪) [Cancel copy‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ(‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫• ]‪) [Skip image and continue‬ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪) [Replace existing image‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ )ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۲۰۱‬ﺳﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺟﻣﻳﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۷۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺳﺢ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ ،<0‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫]‪) [3Erase images‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۰‬‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [LCD brightness‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.(LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪LCD‬‬
‫‪) [brightness‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Review time‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Review time‬‬
‫)ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [5‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) OnzD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪(zD‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OnD‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪(D‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ( ﻟﻧﻔﺽ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻠﺗﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻳﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J/1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻧﻔﺽ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺭﻋﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺗﺑﺎﻫﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Clean nowf‬‬
‫)ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <f‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻭﺗﺎ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺻﺩﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺿﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺭﺭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻛﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ُﻌﻁﻼ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<J/1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ( ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﺻﺎ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺿﺭ ﺟﺳﻣًﺎ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣُﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬
‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺳﻡ ‪ ۳۰ -‬ﺳﻡ ‪ ۰,۷ /‬ﻗﺩﻡ ‪ ۱ -‬ﻗﺩﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻛﻼ ﻣﻌﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺑﺭﻙ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء "ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ" ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻬﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺧﺎﻟﺹ ﻛﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Clean manually‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺢ‬
‫‪.shutter‬‬
‫"‪ "CLn‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E4‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻛﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺩﺧﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺧﻠﻑ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺟﻣﺩ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺃﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<2‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫>‪ ،<q/C‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗُﺻﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪wPictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪Bubble Jet‬‬
‫‪.Direct‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﻁﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ( ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E4‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۱‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹۷‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Paper settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪Q‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Y‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪،Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫‪) Bordered‬ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Borderless‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻧُﺳﺦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺳﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Borderedc‬‬
‫)ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۱۳×۹‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۸‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۹‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۲۰) 20-upc‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ۲۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۳٥‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪) Letter‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪ ۳٥) 35-upp‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ • ]‪ ۲۰) [20-upc‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪۱۹۳‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪<e‬‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Exif‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EVIVID‬ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ENR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 0B/W‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0Cool tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺯﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪0Warm tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻔﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪) zNatural‬ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ "‪"Natural‬‬
‫‪zNatural M‬‬
‫)ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪،‬‬
‫)ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﻔﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EDefault‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۹٦‬‬
‫‪۱۹٤‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪ ،<I‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ >‪ ،<R‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۹۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) c‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۹۳‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ H2 ISO‬ﻭ‪ H3 ISO‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱۹۷‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [7 Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۳‬ﺳﺗﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹٥‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪e‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،۱۹٤‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <e‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ >‪،<z‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۲۸‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (۲٥٥‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ .<9‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹٦‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<y‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻐﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<5‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۰,٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ > < ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۷‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺻﻐﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﺣﺑﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻅﺭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻭﺣﺩﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺛﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ‬
‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺣﻝ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋً ﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹۸‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫‪۱۹۹‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Print type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪File number‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫‪) Standard K‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Index L‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪) Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻋﻳﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <7‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [All image‬ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۰‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <y‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧُﺳﺦ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (۹۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫>‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪(n‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ( ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﻣﺟﻠ ًﺩﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ‬
‫"‪) "Byn‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ (n‬ﺃﻭ "‪) "All image‬ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۱‬‬
‫‪W‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .۱۹۰‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء "ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ(‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۹۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۹٤‬ﺇﻥ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺎﺗﺣً ﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺎ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺛﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۹۸‬‬
‫‪۲۰۲‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[8‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[8‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪،٥ - ۱‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ( ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪[8C.Fn IV -12: Focusing Screen‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۲-٤‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -16: AE Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱٦- ۱‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪[8C.Fn I -17: FE Microadjustment‬‬
‫ﻭ)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۷- ۱‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪8C.Fn III -7: AF‬‬
‫‪) [Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۷- ۳‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]‪) [0: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Exposure :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪shutter‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۳‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ،k‬ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪) [Live mode] (f‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( )‪ (d‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ "‪"With f‬‬
‫)ﻣﻊ ‪ (f‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪) .‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۲۰٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Image/Flash exposure/ :۲‬‬
‫‪) Display‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) INFO.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Autofocus/Drive :۳‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪USM‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲۰٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪f‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ‪) ٤‬ﻣﻊ ‪ f‬ﻟﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪f+۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲٦‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ‪f‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Operation/Others :٤‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪/Shutter‬ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪) AF-ON/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺑﻁ(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Tv/Av‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Av‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ +‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪H‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ‪5‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪f‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۷‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۳۰‬‬
‫‪ :۱,۳‬ﻣﻊ ‪f‬‬
‫‪ :۲,٤+k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪(M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۳۱‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۲۳٤‬‬
‫]‪[Timer after release‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ( ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪۲۰۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱‬‬
‫‪) Exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Image/Flash exp (exposure)/ :۲‬‬
‫)‪) Disp (Display‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳‬‬
‫‪) Autofocus/Drive‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪Operation/ :٤‬‬
‫‪) Others‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪.EOS-1D Mark III‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Exposure :۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱- ۱‬‬
‫‪Exposure level increments‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) 1/3-stop set :۰‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪) 1-stop set :۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪) 1/3-stop compensation‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪) 1/3-stop compensation‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 1/2-stop set :۲‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ‪) 1/2-stop compensation‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫"‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪" → " " :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲- ۱‬‬
‫‪) 1/3-stop :۰‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳- ۱‬‬
‫‪ISO speed setting increments‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪) 1-stop :۱‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪) Set ISO speed range‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ‪.۱۲۸۰۰ - ۱۰۰‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(۱۰۲٤۰۰) H3‬ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ (٥۰) L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(٥۱۲۰۰) H2‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻁﺭﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ EOS‬ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [H1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [H2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[H3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[L‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ۳- ۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ L‬ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO 50‬‬
‫‪۲۰۸‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤- ۱‬‬
‫‪) Bracketing auto cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪) On :۰‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻱ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻁﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) Off :۱‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٥- ۱‬‬
‫‪) Bracketing sequence‬ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪+ ،- ،۰ :۰‬‬
‫‪+ ،۰ ،- :۱‬‬
‫‪- ،۰ ،+ :۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫)‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪ : ۰‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬‫‪ : +‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : ۰‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪ : ۰‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬‫ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬‫‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٦- ۱‬‬
‫‪Number of bracketed shots‬‬
‫)ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻧﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺑﻊ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،۰-٥- ۱‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥) 5 shots :۲‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ ۳) 3 shots :۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ ۷) 7 shots :۳‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) 2 shots :۱‬ﻟﻘﻁﺗﺎﻥ(‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪ ۳ :۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۲ :۱‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٥ :۲‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۷ :۳‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ )‪(۰‬‬
‫‪۱+‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ )‪(۰‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ )‪(۰‬‬
‫‪۲+‬‬
‫‪۱+‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬‫‪۲‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ )‪(۰‬‬
‫‪۳+‬‬
‫‪۲+‬‬
‫‪۱+‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬‫‪۲‬‬‫‪۳-‬‬
‫‪۲۰۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۷- ۱‬‬
‫‪) Spot metering link to AF point‬ﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫‪) Disable (use center AF point) :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ(‬
‫‪) Enable (use active AF point) :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn III -10: Selectable AF point‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۰- ۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۲۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ۱۹ : ۱) [1: 19 points‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ ۱۱ :۲) [2: 11 points‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ ۹ :۳) [3: Inner 9 points‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ( ﺃﻭ ]‪4: Outer‬‬
‫‪ ۹ :٤) [9 points‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ۱۰-۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ٤٥ :۰) [0: 45 points‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ۷- ۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪1: Enable‬‬
‫)‪) [(use active AF point‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.((AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸- ۱‬‬
‫‪) Safety shift‬ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )‪(Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪ (s) shutter‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable (ISO speed) :۲‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﻳﺔ )‪ ،(d) (AE‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،(s) shutter‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳- ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۱۲‬ﻭ‪ ،۱۳‬ﻓﺳﻳﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۹- ۱‬‬
‫‪Select usable shooting modes‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪) BULB ،d ،f ،s ،a‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪.<X‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۰- ۱‬‬
‫‪Select usable metering modes‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪) Evaluative :q‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ(‪:w ،‬‬
‫‪) Partial‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ(‪) Spot :r ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ(‪Center- :e ،‬‬
‫‪) weighted average‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ( ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ >‪ .<X‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۱- ۱‬‬
‫‪Exposure mode in manual exposure‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Specified metering mode :۰‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ(‬
‫‪) Evaluative metering :۱‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Partial metering :۲‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Spot metering :۳‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Center-weighted average :٤‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ ۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۲- ۱‬‬
‫‪Set shutter speed range‬‬
‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(shutter‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ‪ ۱/۸۰۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱/۸۰۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱/٤۰۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۳- ۱‬‬
‫‪) Set aperture value range‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ f/91‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،f/1.4‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ f/1.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .f/64‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٤- ۱‬‬
‫‪) Apply shooting/metering mode‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <A‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻝ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.(AE‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<A‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻟﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ :(AE‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪With AE lock button‬‬
‫)‪) [(AF on/AF off‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪) (AE‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ((‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻟﻳﻘﻭﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫]‪) [AF on/AF off‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "Bulb‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٥- ۱‬‬
‫‪Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪.(f‬‬
‫‪) Auto :۰‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱/۳۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﻼﺋﻡ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 1/300-1/60 sec. auto :۱‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱/٦۰-۱/۳۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۱/۳۰۰) 1/300 sec. (fixed) :۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱/۳۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻣﻧﻊ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،۲‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٦- ۱‬‬
‫‪) AE Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ "ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ" ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱±‬ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ .۱/۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ .+‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۷- ۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ "ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ" ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺗﺟﻌﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱±‬ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ .۱/۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﻅﻠﻣًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫‪ .+‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟً ﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Image/Flash exposure/Display :۲‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱- ۲‬‬
‫‪) Long exposure noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Auto :۱‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫‪) On :۲‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪[On‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ "‪ "۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪Live View‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪) .‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲- ۲‬‬
‫‪High ISO speed noise reduction‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻳﻼﺋﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Strong :۲‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) Standard :۰‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۳‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Low :۱‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﺳﻳﻘﻝ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﺋﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳- ۲‬‬
‫‪) Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﻧﺳﺑﺗﻪ ‪ ٪۱۸‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.۱۲۸۰۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ >‪ <H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤- ۲‬‬
‫‪) Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ‪) Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۸۱‬‬
‫‪) Strong :۲‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) Standard :۰‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۳‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Low :۱‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٥- ۲‬‬
‫‪) E-TTL II flash metering‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪(E-TTL II‬‬
‫‪) Evaluative flash metering :۰‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Average flash metering :۱‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FE‬‬
‫‪۲۱٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٦- ۲‬‬
‫‪) Shutter curtain sync.‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪(Shutter‬‬
‫‪) 1st-curtain synchronization :۰‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬
‫‪) 2nd-curtain synchronization :۱‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺛﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻛﺎﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlites‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱/٥۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱/٦۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۷- ۲‬‬
‫‪) Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable :۰‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۱‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪.۱٥- ۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸- ۲‬‬
‫‪Viewfinder info. during exposure‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﺟﻳﺙ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "Bulb‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۹- ۲‬‬
‫‪LCD panel illumination during Bulb‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On during Bulb :۱‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۱٦‬ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۰- ۲‬‬
‫‪) INFO. button when shooting‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫‪) INFO.‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Displays shooting functions :۰‬‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <W‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪ <Y‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <Z‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <O‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Displays camera settings :۱‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲٤٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Autofocus/Drive :۳‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱- ۳‬‬
‫‪) USM lens electronic MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪(USM‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ USM‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪،EF85mm f/1.2L USM ،EF50mm f/1.0L USM‬‬
‫‪،EF200mm f/1.8L USM ،EF85mm f/1.2L II USM‬‬
‫‪،EF400mm f/2.8L USM ،EF300mm f/2.8L USM‬‬
‫‪،EF500mm f/4.5L USM ،EF400mm f/2.8L II USM‬‬
‫‪،EF1200mm f/5.6L USM ،EF600mm f/4L USM‬‬
‫‪EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM‬‬
‫‪) Enable after One-Shot AF :۰‬ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۲/۳-۱- ٤‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable after One-Shot AF :۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۲/۳-۱- ٤‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable in AF mode :۲‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲- ۳‬‬
‫‪AI Servo tracking sensitivity‬‬
‫)ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‪) ،[Slow‬ﺑﻁﻲء(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‪) ،[Fast‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺟﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳- ۳‬‬
‫‪) AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Servo‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Servo‬ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫‪) AF priority/Tracking priority :۰‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF priority/Drive speed priority :۱‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪) Release/Drive speed priority :۲‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪) Release/Tracking priority :۳‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗُﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤- ۳‬‬
‫‪) AI Servo AF tracking method‬ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ )ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ = ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) Center AF point :(AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ + AF‬ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:(۱/۲/۳-۸- ۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ :۰‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :۱‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﻋﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٥- ۳‬‬
‫‪) Lens drive when AF impossible‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Focus search on :۰‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Focus search off :۱‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ؛ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٦- ۳‬‬
‫‪) Lens AF stop button function‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF stop :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) AF start :۱‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AE lock :۲‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪ .(AE‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF point :۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪) M :‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ( ‪) Auto/Auto 8‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪8‬‬
‫‪) center‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻌﺩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT :٤‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪AI SERVO z‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ (Al Servo‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،(Al Servo‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ (Al Servo‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) IS start :٥‬ﺑﺩء ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <ON‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٦‬ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<I‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۲۲٤‬‬
‫‪) Spot AF :۷‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺧﻁ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﺿﻳﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺯء ﺃﺻﻐﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺭً ﺍ ً‬
‫ﺷﺎﻗﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ‪spot AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺿﻭء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۷ - ۳‬‬
‫‪AF Microadjustment‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ۲۰±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪) Backward‬ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ((‪.‬‬
‫‪) Forward‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ( ‪:+ /‬‬
‫)‪:-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻹﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭًﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Adjust all by same amount :۱‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust by lens :۲‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ JPEG) JPEG Large‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭ( ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪) JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ( ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸- ۳‬‬
‫‪AF expansion with selected point‬‬
‫)ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪One-Shot‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Left/right AF point :۱‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻳﻣﻳﻧﺎ‪/‬ﻳﺳﺎ ًﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻭﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Surrounding AF points :۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All 45 points area :۳‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـ ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻳﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺻﻑ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ )ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۸‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻊ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭًﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ٤٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۱/۲/۳/٤-۱۰- ۳‬ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۱‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻭﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﻳﺻﺑﺢ ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪،۲‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۸‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻭﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫‪۲۲۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۹- ۳‬‬
‫‪) Multi-controller while metering‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) AF point selection :۱‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ً <S‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ً <9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۰- ۳‬‬
‫‪) Selectable AF point‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ٤٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻐﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤٥) 45 points :۰‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ(‬
‫‪ ۱۹) 19 points :۱‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ۱۹‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.EOS-1D Mark III‬‬
‫‪ ۱۱) 11 points :۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ۱۱‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۹) Inner 9 points :۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۹) Outer 9 points :٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ(‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ۹‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫]‪ ۱۹) [19 points‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪ ۹) [Inner 9 points‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ(‬
‫]‪ ۱۱) [11 points‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪ ۹) [Outer 9 points‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪۲۲۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۱- ۳‬‬
‫‪) Switch to registered AF point‬ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<w‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Switch with :۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ( >‪<9‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<9‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Only while <A> is pressed :۲‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪(<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<A‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<A‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻛﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۹۷‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<Z‬‬
‫• ‪ : [ -- -- ] HP‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ : SEL [ ] ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫‪ :SEL HP‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۱۰- ۳‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۲- ۳‬‬
‫‪) AF point auto selection‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ )‪ (/‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ .۳- ٤‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫‪) 5direct:disable :۰‬ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪) enable:6/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪) 5direct:disable :۱‬ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪) disable:6/‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 5direct:disable :۲‬ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪) enable:6/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪۲۲٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۳- ۳‬‬
‫‪) AF point display during focus‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) On :۰‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Off :۱‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On (when focus achieved) :۲‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ((‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺧﺎﻓﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٤- ۳‬‬
‫‪) AF point brightness‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Normal :۰‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪) Brighter :۱‬ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٥- ۳‬‬
‫‪) AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪) Enable :۰‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۱‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪ IR) IR AF assist beam only :۲‬ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disabled‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺗﺣﻝ ﻣﺣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﻱ ‪ ۰‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪۲۲٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٦-۳‬‬
‫‪) Orientation linked AF point‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Same for both vertical/horizontal :۰‬ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻛﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Select different AF points :۱‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،۱‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۹۷‬ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ( ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(٥۳‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۷- ۳‬‬
‫‪) Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ۱۱۸‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۲‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪) Down with SET :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪ <2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۸- ۳‬‬
‫‪Continuous shooting speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪:‬‬
‫>‪ ۱۰ :<o‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ >‪ ۳ :<p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ ۹‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۹- ۳‬‬
‫‪Limit continuous shot count‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﻘﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺣﺩ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .۹۹‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪) Operation/Others :٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱- ٤‬‬
‫‪:۰‬‬
‫‪:۱‬‬
‫‪:۲‬‬
‫‪:۳‬‬
‫‪:٤‬‬
‫‪Shutter button/AF-ON button‬‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ‪/Shutter‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Metering + AF start‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Metering + AF start/AF stop‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺩء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Metering start/Meter + AF start‬ﺑﺩء ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ‪ +‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺩء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AE lock/Metering + AF start‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫‪) Metering + AF start/Disable‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺩء‪/‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۲- ٤‬‬
‫‪) AF-ON/AE lock button switch‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪) <p‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <A/y‬ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۳- ٤‬‬
‫‪Quick Control Dial in metering‬‬
‫)ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Exposure compensation/Aperture :۰‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪) AF point selection :۱‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<S‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۱۲- ۳‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ISO speed :۲‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF point selection :۳‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ‪S z O +‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<S‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ،۱۲- ۲‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <S‬ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <S‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<6‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ISO speed :٤‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪Z z O + (ISO‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <Z‬ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <Z‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ ،<6‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲۸‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٤- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Assign SET button‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺑﻁ"(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Normal :۰‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( "ﻣﻌﻁﻝ"‬
‫‪) White balance :۱‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Image size :۲‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ISO speed :۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style :٤‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Record func. + media/folder :٥‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ +‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [5 Record func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Menu display :٦‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Image playback :۷‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱۲٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱٤۲‬ﺳﻳﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٥- ٤‬‬
‫‪Tv/Av setting for Manual exposure‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Tv/Av‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪Tv=6/Av=5 :۰‬‬
‫‪Tv=5/Av=6 :۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ .(AEB‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪.<5/6‬‬
‫‪۲۲۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪٦- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Dial direction during Tv/Av‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ‪(Tv/Av‬‬
‫‪) Normal :۰‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪) Reverse direction :۱‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻛﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ .<5‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۷- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Av setting without lens‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Av‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۸- ٤‬‬
‫‪) WB + media/image size setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ +‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Rear LCD panel :۰‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) LCD monitor :۱‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ﻭ]‪) [Image size‬ﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﻭ]‪) [Record func+media/folder sel.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۱‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۰‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۹- ٤‬‬
‫‪) H button function‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪(H‬‬
‫‪) Protect (hold: Record memo) :۰‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ :‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ((‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <H‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Record memo (Protect: Disabled) :۱‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ )ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ((‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<H‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪[3 Protect images‬‬
‫)ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Play memo (hold: Record memo) :۲‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ :‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ((‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <H‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <H‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [3Protect images‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۰- ٤‬‬
‫>‪Button function when 5 <OFF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ‪5‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫‪) Normal (enable) :۰‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ((‬
‫‪) Disable :۱‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ( ‪ 5 ،6‬ﻭ‪) Multi-controller‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ <5‬ﻭ>‪ <9‬ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻲء‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﻭﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﻬﻭ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<J‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪<5‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <9‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۱‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۱- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Start movie shooting‬ﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬
‫‪) Default :۰‬ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ( )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪) Quick start :۱‬ﺑﺩء ﺳﺭﻳﻊ( )ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(<I‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [6 Live View/Movie func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱٤۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۲- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Focusing Screen‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪lEc-C IV :۰‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﻟﻳﺯﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪lEc-A, B, C, C II, C III, D, H, I, L :۱‬‬
‫ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪pEc-S :۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪kEc-N, R :۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﻳﺯﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Ec-S‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ f/1.8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.f/2.8‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،f/1.8‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺻﻌﺏ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،f/2.8‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ Ec-A‬ﻭ‪ Ec-B‬ﻭ‪ Ec-I‬ﻭ‪ Ec-L‬ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۲‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۳- ٤‬‬
‫‪Timer length for timer‬‬
‫)ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﺕ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻭ‪ ۱٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .Shutter‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) 6 sec. timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.<A>/‬‬
‫• ‪) 16 sec. timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻭﻗﻔﻝ ‪) FE‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫• ‪) Timer after release‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .Shutter‬ﻭﺳﺗﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٤- ٤‬‬
‫‪Shortened release time lag‬‬
‫)ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ .Shutter‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻗﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٪۲۰‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۳‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٥- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Add aspect ratio information‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ َﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ ٦×٦‬ﺳﻡ ﻭ‪ ٤٫٥×٦‬ﺳﻡ ﻭ‪ ٥×٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺻﻬﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off :۰‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 6:6 :۱‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٦:٦‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 3:4 :۲‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(۳:٤‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 4:5 :۳‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٤:٥‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 6:7 :٤‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٦:۷‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 10:12 :٥‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(۱۰:۱۲‬‬
‫‪) Aspect ratio 5:7 :٦‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪(٥:۷‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱٦- ٤‬‬
‫‪) Add image verification data‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Disable :۰‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪) Enable :۱‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۱٥۷‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫)ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[C.Fn setting register/apply‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[8‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪C.Fn setting‬‬
‫‪) [register/apply‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺿﺑﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]* ‪) [Set‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫]* ‪) [Set‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲۳٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -16: AE Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱٦- ۱‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪[8C.Fn I -17: FE Microadjustment‬‬
‫ﻭ)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۷- ۱‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪8C.Fn III -7: AF‬‬
‫‪) [Microadjustment‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪8C.Fn IV -12: Focusing‬‬
‫‪) [Screen‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱۲- ٤‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Confirm settings‬ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻗﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﻧﺟﻣﺔ ]*[ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ( ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]* ‪) [Set‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ( ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ * ‪) Set‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ‪My‬‬
‫‪) Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <M‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ"‬
‫‪) Sort‬ﻓﺭﺯ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺭﺯ( ﻭﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫>‪<5‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Delete / Delete all items‬ﺣﺫﻑ ‪ /‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺫﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ( ﺑﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Display from My Menu‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ً [9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۷‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ‪ EOS-1D Mark IV‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Save/load settings on media‬‬
‫)ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Save/load‬‬
‫‪) [settings on media‬ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Save‬ﺣﻔﻅ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Save‬ﺣﻔﻅ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺩء(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺩء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Change file name‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )‪ ۸‬ﺃﺣﺭﻑ( ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ "ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .۸٦‬ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳۸‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ +‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫]‪ [1‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫]‪ [2‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫]‪ [4‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪6/‬‬
‫]‪ [5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪+‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪ [6‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫]‪ [7‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ )ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪ [8‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫]‪ [9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Load‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ ۱٦- ۱‬ﻭ‪۱۷- ۱‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ۷- ۳‬ﻭ‪.۱۲- ٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪.EOS-1D Mark IV‬‬
‫‪۲۳۹‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Regist/apply basic settings‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪Regist/apply‬‬
‫‪) [basic settings‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Apply‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Record func.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۱‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬/‫ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬:
‫ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬k
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
(‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬z
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬:k ‫ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬:o
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬a
f
s
d
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
JPEG
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
RAW
k
k
k
k
k
k
‫ )ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬RAW+JPEG
(RAW+JPEG
Image size
(‫)ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬Auto
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
M ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬Manual
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬Standard
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬Portrait
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬Landscape
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‬Neutral Picture Style
(‫)ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‬Faithful
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬Monochrome
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬User Defined
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
sRGB
k
k
k
k
k
k
Adobe RGB
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
k
k
k
k
k
k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(‫)ﻣُﺣﺳﱢ ﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
Lens peripheral illumination
(‫ )ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬correction
Long exposure noise reduction
(‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
High ISO speed noise reduction
(‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ISO ‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(‫ )ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬Highlight tone priority
o
‫ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬Auto WB
(‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬Preset WB
ً
(‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬Custom WB
(‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
Color temperature setting
(‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ )ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬WB correction
(‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ )ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬WB-BKT
(‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
ISO speed
(ISO ‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
White
balance
‫)ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
(‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
Color space
(‫)ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
۲٤۲
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ :o‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪AF point‬‬
‫‪selection‬‬
‫)ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪) Manual‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) One-Shot‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ a f s‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫‪Exposure‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪External‬‬
‫‪Speedlite‬‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪f‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪c‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Partial‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Spot‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ(‬
‫‪) Center-weighted average‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Program shift‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪Exposure compensation‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) AE lock‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Depth-of-field preview‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ( ‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪High-speed continuous shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪Low-speed continuous shooting‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) 10-sec. self-timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪) 2-sec. self-timer‬ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪) Silent single shooting‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) FE lock‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪Flash exposure compensation‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Single shooting‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Drive‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪f‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪) Evaluative‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪Metering‬‬
‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪M‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫‪۲٤۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LC-5‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪RS-80N3‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪TC-80N3‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪HTC-100‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪*WFT-E2/E2A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ‪ USB‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪IFC-500U‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪Ethernet‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫* ‪ :WFT-E2/E2A‬ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۲٫۰٫۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪۲٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪PCMCIA‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬
‫‪MT-24EX‬‬
‫‪Macro Ring Lite‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX‬‬
‫‪580EX II‬‬
‫‪430EX II‬‬
‫‪270EX‬‬
‫‪ST-E2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫‪L6‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ‪CR2025‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ EOS‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‬
‫‪E1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E4‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪CB-570‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LC-E4‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ACK-E4‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٤٥‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -10: INFO. button when shooting‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱۰- ۲‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) .INFO‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۱۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[1: Displays camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ( ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪/(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۸۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۱۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۱۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ f CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪) g SD‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۲۱‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪WFT-E2/E2A‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۳‬‬
‫‪۲٤٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Battery info.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ،(۳٥‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﻣﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E4‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ shutter‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪Calibration is recommended when charging battery next‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۳۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J/1‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪) [Cannot communicate with battery‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ( ﻭﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫< ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‬
‫‪۲٤۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ‪ ٥‬ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ‪ CR2025‬ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤۹‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(+‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﻛﺎ ﺻﻐﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﻳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬًﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ‪.CR2025‬‬
‫‪۲٤۸‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪۲٤۹‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .۲٥٥‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‪) <CAL/CHARGE‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺷﺣﻥ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳۰‬ﻭ‪.۳۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻠﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺗﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [6 Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ .(۲٤۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۲۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ (۱٤۱ ،۱۲٥‬ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٤۹‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [5 Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪) EF-S‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ‪.۲٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷۹ ،۳٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪،٤۱‬‬
‫‪.(۱۰۰ ،۹٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤۱ ،٤۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۰‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:٤- ۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :۳) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Standard/‬‬
‫‪) [Low/Strong‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪/‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٥ ،۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۲- ۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪) [Standard/Low/Disable] :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Strong‬ﻗﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺳﻳﻘﻝ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ )ﺣﻘﻝ ﻋﺷﺑﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪.ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳- ۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ‪ .ISO 200‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO 100‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻁء ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ >‪ <f‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ً‬
‫ﻟﻳﻼ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ( ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ]‪8C.Fn I -15: Flash sync. speed in‬‬
‫‪) [Av mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۱٥- ۱‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪۲‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ( ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۱‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ]‪) [Flash metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪) TTL) [TTL (autoflash‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(( ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،(۰‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Av‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn I -15: Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱٥-۱‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۱۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪) Live View Shooting‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [LV z/k set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Stills‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫‪۲٥۲‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [LV z/k set.‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٤٤ ،۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ‪ ۸‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫" ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD Speed‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ‪" ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﺭ ً‬
‫ﻫﺩﻓﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫‪ ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫‪.UDMA‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥۳‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [4 Highlight alert‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [4 AF point disp.‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ )"_"(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .sRGB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۹۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪) [5 File name setting‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺗﺣﺕ ‪) User setting 1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪) (۱‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫‪۲٥٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ‪.۰۰۰۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٤۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷۱ ،۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [8C.Fn IV -9: H button function‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ :۹- ٤‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ (H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ :۲) [2: Play memo (hold Record memo‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ( )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۲۳۱ ،۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺻﺩﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺿﻭﺿﺎ ًء ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۱۹٤‬‬
‫‪۲٥٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺛﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻝ‬
‫‪Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean‬‬
‫‪) the lens contacts.‬ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱٦ ،۱۳‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪Card * cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card‬‬
‫‪) with camera.‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ *‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۰ ،۳٦‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪) Cannot save images because card * is full. Replace card *.‬ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ * ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ *‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(٥۰ ،۱۷۹ ،۳٦‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on‬‬
‫‪) again.‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳٤‬‬
‫‪Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and‬‬
‫‪،20 ،10‬‬
‫‪) on again or re-install the battery. ،40 ،30‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫‪ ،60 ،50‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪،80 ،70‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.(۳۲ ،۳٤‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۲٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪) AF/AE‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪) CF‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،(UDMA‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪SDHC‬‬
‫* ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪WFT-E2/‬‬
‫‪) E2A‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪ ۲٫۰٫۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻳﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ۱۸٫٦ × ۲۷٫۹‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻥ ‪) Canon‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ۱,۳‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫‪ ۱٦٫۱۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳:۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲٫۰‬‬
‫‪) RAW ،JPEG‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ۱٤‬ﺑﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫‪ ۱٦٫۰۰ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۳۲٦٤ × ٤۸۹٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۱۲٫٤۰ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۲۸۸۰ × ٤۳۲۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪۱‬‬
‫‪ ۸٫٤۰ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۲۳٦۸ × ۳٥٥۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫۰۰ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۱٦۳۲ × ۲٤٤۸‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۱٦٫۰۰ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۳۲٦٤ × ٤۸۹٦‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪) M-RAW‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ۹٫۰۰ : (RAW‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۲٤٤۸ × ۳٦۷۲‬‬
‫‪) S-RAW‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ٤٫۰۰ : (RAW‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )‪(۱٦۳۲ × ۲٤٤۸‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‪) Auto switch media ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ(‪) Rec. to multiple ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪) Rec. separately‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ(‪) User setting 1 ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪،(۱‬‬
‫‪) Preset code‬ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩ‬
‫‪) User setting 2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۲٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‪) Portrait ،‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ(‪) Landscape ،‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ(‪) Neutral ،‬ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ(‪) Faithful ،‬ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ(‪) Monochrome ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‪) User Def. 1 - 3 ،‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪(۳ - ۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪) ،‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻅﻝ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪-۲٥۰۰‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰۰۰۰‬ﻛﻠﻔﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫* ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺧﻣﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٪۱۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪) × ۰٫۷٦‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ‪ ۱-‬ﻡ‪ ۱-‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ(‬
‫‪ ۲۰‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱-‬ﻡ‪(۱-‬‬
‫‪ ۱٫۰+ - ۳٫۰‬ﻡ‪(dpt) ۱-‬‬‫ﻣﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Ec-C IV‬ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻭﻱ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ٤٥ :‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )‪ ۳۹‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ‪ ٦ +‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) EV -1 - 18‬ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪،AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۲٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦۳‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ )ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ )‪ ٪۱۳٫٥‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )‪ ٪۳,۸‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ISO 100 -‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫‪12800‬‬
‫)ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ( )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ( ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،(ISO 50) L‬‬
‫‪(ISO 102400) H3 ،(ISO 51200) H2 ،(ISO 25600) H1‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ‪ ۳± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪:(AE‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪:Shutter‬‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱/۸۰۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪ X‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۱/۳۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪(EOS‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ٍ ۱۰‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ *** :JPEG‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫‪ *** :RAW‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ ‪ *** :RAW+JPEG‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )*** ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ISO 100 ،۸ :JPEG‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺃﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪Ultra DMA‬‬
‫)‪ (UDMA‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۳±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱/۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ( ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۰/٥‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻁﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪) ۱۰۸۰ × ۱۹۲۰ :‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ( ‪30p/25p/24p :‬‬
‫‪60p/50p :‬‬
‫‪) ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪60p/50p :‬‬
‫‪(SD) ٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬‬
‫* ‪ ۲۹٫۹۷ :30p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۲٥٫۰ :25p ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۲۳٫۹۷٦ :24p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ٥۹٫۹٤ :60p ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٥۰٫۰ :50p‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۳۰ : (30p/25p/24p) ۱۰۸۰ × ۱۹۲۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۳۳۰ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪(60p/50p) ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪ ۱٦٥ :‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪(60p/50p) ٤۸۰ × ٦٤۰‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪۲٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪) Auto :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪) ISO 100 - 12800‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،(ISO 51200) H2 ،(ISO 25600) H1‬‬
‫‪(ISO 102400) H3‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪ ۹۲۰۰۰۰‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )‪ (VGA‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٪۱۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )‪ ۷‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۰ - ۱,٥‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪WFT-E2/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪) E2A‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪ ۲٫۰٫۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻳﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪/‬ﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺭﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪۱٫۱‬‬
‫‪۲٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦۲‬ﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺣﺗﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺧﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪/‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪/(NTSC/PAL‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟـ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺩﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﺧﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪N3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D‬ﺃﻭ ‪WFT-E2/‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪) E2A‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪ ۲٫۰٫۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻳﻪ(‬
‫• ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪۲٦۲‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E4‬ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ‪(۱‬‬
‫* ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E4‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ(‬
‫)ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱٥۰۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۱۲۰۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲۷۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ۲۳۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫* ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۲۳‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۷۳/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E4‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ‪CR2025‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۷۹٫۹ × ۱٥٦٫٦ × ۱٥٦ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ۳٫۱ × ٦٫۲ × ٦٫۱/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۱۸۰‬ﺟﻡ‪ ٤۱٫٦/‬ﺁﻭﻧﺱ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٥ - ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۱۱۳ - ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E4‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۱٫۱‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲۳۰۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۹۲٫۸ × ۳٤٫۲ × ٦۸٫٤ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ۳٫۷ × ۱٫۳ × ۲٫۷/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺟﻡ‪ ٦٫۳/‬ﺁﻭﻧﺱ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E4‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲٤۰ - ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ ۲٤/‬ﻓﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۲٫٦‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۱٫٥٥/‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻡ‪ ٦,٦/‬ﺃﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤۰ - ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ۱۰٤ - ۳۲/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٪۸٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ(‪ ۹٥ × ٥۲٫۳ × ۱٥٥ :‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ۳٫۷ × ۲٫۱ × ٦٫۱/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ۳٤۰‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣًﺎ‪ ۱۲٫۰/‬ﺁﻭﻧﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣُﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CompactFlash‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺧﺹ ‪.SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ۲٫۰‬ﻭﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪) Exif 2.21‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻡ "‪ .("Exif Print‬ﻭ‪ Exif Print‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،Exif Print‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫"ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺭﺧﺹ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻙ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ )‪ (۱‬ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ (۲‬ﻟﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺹ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ .MPEG-4‬ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺻﺭﻳﺣً ﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻣﻧﻳًﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪".MPEG-4‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱٫۳‬ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)‪ ۱۸٫٦ × ۲۷٫۹‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ۰٫۷۳ × ۱٫۱۰/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫)‪ ۲٤ × ۳٦‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪ ۰,۹٤ × ۱,٤۲/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪۲٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣٌﻌﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻌﻛﺳﺔ )‪ .(- +‬ﻻ ﺗﻣﺯﺝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻳﻥ‬‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫)‪ ۳۲‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ ‪ ۱۰٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺕ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺗﻠﻊ ﻁﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺧﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺧﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺯﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺻﺎﺏ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺻﻌﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺻﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻭﺩ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺧﺹ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻁﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻙ ﻭﺑﻳﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦٦‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺑﺑﺕ ﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺻﺎﺭ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻌﺛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺩ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺧﺩﺵ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻧﻳﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻳﻝ ﻓﻭﻗﻪ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻻ ٍ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻛﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻣﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻭﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺑﺑﺔ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻁﻭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻣﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻅﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻧﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺻﻼﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪۲٦۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪DS126211‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻁﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ‪(۱) :‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (۲‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺑﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻟﻳﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻣﺕ ﺻﻳﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﻟّﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۱٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻟﻳﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳُﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬
‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺭﻗﻡ‪(٥۱٦)۳۲۸-٥٦۰۰ :‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E4‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪ ۲٤۰ - ۱۰۰ :‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣُﻘﺩﺭ‪ ۱۲٫٦ :‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ— ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪.LC-E4‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ )‪ (۱‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪(۲) ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (۳) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ — ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E4‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺷﺭﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۷‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۸‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﻳﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻟﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۹‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ؛ ﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱۰‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ؛ ﺑﻝ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺄﺧﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱۱‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺭﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻛﻧﺩﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻭﻟﻳﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻧﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺭﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺕ – ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۱ .................................... ۷۲۰ × ۱۲۸۰‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱ .....................................۱۰۸۰×۱۹۲۰‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱ ........................................ ٤۸۰×٦٤۰‬‬
‫‪۹۲ .....................................Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ‪۲۰۹ ،۱۱٤ ....‬‬
‫‪) AI SERVO‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪۹٦ .............................. (AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲۱۸ .........................‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪۲۱۸ .....................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ‪۲۱۹ ...............................‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ‪۱۱۰ ...‬‬
‫‪۱٤۱ ..........................................Full HD‬‬
‫‪۱۷۱ ،۱٦۳ .....................................HDMI‬‬
‫‪٥۹ .............................................. JPEG‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ( ‪۱٤٤ ،۱۱۲ ......................‬‬
‫‪) MF‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ(‪۱۳۸ ،۱۰۰ ..............‬‬
‫‪) M-RAW‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪٦۲ ،٥۹ ........(RAW‬‬
‫‪) NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ( )ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ‪۱۹٤ .................‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰ ،۱٥۱ .................................... NTSC‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪۹٥ .........................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( ‪۱۰٦ .....................‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰ ،۱٥۱ ....................................... PAL‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦۲ ،٥۹ ..........................................RAW‬‬
‫‪٦۰ .................................... RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۷ ................‬‬
‫‪) S-RAW‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ‪٦۲ ،٥۹ ..........(RAW‬‬
‫‪۹۲ .............................................. sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۸ .... (shutter‬‬
‫)‪۱٥۰ ،۳۷ ................. Ultra DMA (UDMA‬‬
‫‪ WB‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ‪٦۹ ،٦۷ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪۱٦۰ .......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۲٤۹ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۸٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪٤۸ ..............................‬‬
‫‪۲۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۸ ............shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۱۰ .........‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۲ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۸۹ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۸۹ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪۲۸ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱٤۲ ،۱۲٦ ......... k/z‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪۷۸ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪۱۹۲ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪٤۸ ............................... WFT‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪۱۹۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪۸۷ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪۸٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۱ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ‪۲۱٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥۲ ،۳٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۱۱ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ )ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪۱۹٤ .......................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪۱۰٦ ...................(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪۱۰۷ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪٥۰ ،۳٦ ،۱۳ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪٥۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪٥۰ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪۳۸ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٦۹ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۲۳٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪۱۸٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪٦۹ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٦۹ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪٤۹ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪۲٤۸ ............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪۱۹٦ ،٦۸ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۹٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ‪۹۷ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ(‪۹۷ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ‪۲٦٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪٥۲ .......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۸۲ ،۱٦۲ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱۸۲ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲٤۰ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪٥۷ ..........................‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ ‪٥۷ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ )ﺍﺳﻡ( ‪۷٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ‪۱۹٦ ،٦۸ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪۸۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۲٥ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۳۰ ............................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۳۲ ...........‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۳۰ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۲۸ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱۳۱ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۱۳۸ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪۱٤۱ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ‪۱۲۹ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪۱۳٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪۱۰۱ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ ‪۱۰۱ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ‪۱۰۱ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ‪٤٥ ،٤۱ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۱۰۱ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪۱۰۱ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۱۰۱ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۱۹ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۱۳ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ‪۲۱۰ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪۲۱٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪۲۱٤ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲۱٤ ................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪۱٥۷ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪۱۹۹ ....... (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۱۸٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪۱۸۷ ،۱۸٤ ،۱۸۳ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪۱۸٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪۱۹۷ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ )ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ‪٥۰ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪٥۱ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ ‪۷۲ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۷۳ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪۷۲ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪۸۰ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪۷۸ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪۷۹ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪۷۳ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۲۲ .... (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ‪۳۳ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۲٤۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪٥۹ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪۱۷۱ ،۱٦۳ ،۱٥۱ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪۱۷۱ ،۱٦۳ ،۱٥۱ ..................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٥۹ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۸۷ .................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱٥۷ ،۱٥۲ ،٦۱ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪٦۲ ،٦۱ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ )ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‪۱۹۳ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻭﺓ‪۱۷ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‪۲٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ‪۲٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲۳۸ .............................‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ‪٦۷ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۱۷۲ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ‪۲٦٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪۱۱٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪۱۹٦ ،٦۸ ...................................‬‬
‫‪۲۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ )ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪۱۹٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ )ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ‪۱۹٤ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۸۸ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪٤ ......................................... 3‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۲٥٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ )ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ( ‪۱۹٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪٤٤ .............................................. 0‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪٤۱ ........................................ shutter‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۲۲۰ .......... (AF‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪٤۱ ......................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۲۰۸ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪٤۹ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٦٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۲۰۸ ،۱٤٦ ،٦٤ ..........................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪٦٥ ....................(Auto‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪۲۰۸ ........................ ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ‪۱۷۱ ،۱۷۰ ،۱٦۳ ،۳ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۷ ،۱۳ ....................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪۱۸۰ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٤٦ ،٤٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲۱۷ ،۲۳ ...........‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۲۳۲ .................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪۷۲ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪۱٥۸ ....... (RGB/‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‪٥۲ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٥۹ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪٦۲ ،٥۹ .................RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪٦۲ ،٥۹ ............... RAW‬‬
‫‪۲۷۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪٦۹ ،٦۷ ............................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ‪٦۹ ،٦۷ ......................‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ‪٦٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۱٥۸ .............................. (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۱٦۸ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱۸۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪٤٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ‪۱۷٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‪۱۷۹ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‪۱٥۷ ................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ‪۱٥۸ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱٥۹ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪۱٦۰ ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ‪۱٦۱ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪۱٦۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱٥٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۱۷۲ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٥۷ ،۱٤۸ ،۱۲۸ ........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪۱۷۰ ،۱٦۳ ...............‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ‪۹۹ ....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۹٤ ........(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۱٥۸ .............................. (AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۹۷ ... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۲۲٥ ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻓﺭﺓ‪٥۲ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪۱۳٥ ،۱۰۰ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪۱۳۸ ،۱۳۱ ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۱۳۸ ،۱۰۰ .....(MF‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۱۳٥ ،۱۰۰ ................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪۹٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‪۱۰٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۱۰٤ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۲۱۳ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۲۱۳ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪۲۲۱ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۰٤ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪۱۳۸ ،۱۰۰ ..............(MF‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۲۱٥ ،۱۲۳ ...E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ‪۱۰٥ .............‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪٤۰ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ‪٤۱ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪٤۱ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۹٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪۳۳ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٥۲ .......................‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲٤۷ ،۳٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲٤۷ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ‪۳۰ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ‪۳۳ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ‪۱۲۹ ،٦۱ ،۳٥ ...............‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۲۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۲٤۷ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪۳٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱۸۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪۱۹۳ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪۱۹۲ ............................‬‬
‫‪۱۸۹ .............................PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱۹۹ ............... (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱۹٦ ،۱۹٤ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ‪۱۹۷ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪۱۹۷ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ )ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪۱۹٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪۱۹۰ ............................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۲۰ ........................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪) USB‬ﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‪۱۹۰ ....................‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪۱۸ .....................‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۲۲۳ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪/‬ﻓﻙ ‪۳۹ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۸۲ ..................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲۱۷ ،۲۳ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‪۱٦۸ ................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪۱٦۰ .......‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱٥۱ ،۱۳۰ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۱٦۸ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪۱٥۹ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ‪۱٦۱ ،۱۳۸ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪۱٥٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪۱۷۰ ،۱٦۳ ........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۹‬ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۹ ..........‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ ‪۲۲٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱٥۷ ،۱٤۸ ،۱۲۸ .........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲٦٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻍ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪۲۳۲ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪۱۰۲ ...................‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪۱٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۲٤۷ ،۳٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪۱٥۷ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ‪۱۲٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪۱۲٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪۱۲۰ ،۱۱۹ ...‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪۱۱۹ .................(FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۱۹ ............‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪) shutter‬ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪۱۲۲ ...‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۲۱۲ ،۱۲۰ .............‬‬
‫‪۲۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۱۲۱ .........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪۱۲۰ ....Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪۱٤۱ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۱٤۳ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ‪۱٦۳ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪۱٥۲ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۷ ..............‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۱٤۳ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۱٥۱ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱٤۸ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٤ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱٦٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱٥۱ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٤۲ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪۱٥۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۱٤۹ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪۱۷۰ ،۱٦۳ ...............‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٤٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ ‪۲۳۷ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ‪٤٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‪۲۳۷ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )‪٤۳ ،۳٤ .................. (5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )‪٤۲ ............................ (6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪٤۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪٤۳ ........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺻﻳﺭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ(‪۲۳۳ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۱۹ .................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۲۲۷ ،۲۱۲ ،۱۱٥ ...............‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۹٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺁﺓ‪۱۱۸ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪۲۰۰ ،٦٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪/f‬ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ‪۹۸ .............................‬‬
‫‪۲۷٤‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪۱۷۱ ،۱۷۰ ،۱٦۳ ،۳ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۱۸ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪٥۳ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۰ ............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۲٤٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٦۰ .................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٤۹ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ‪۱۲۹ ،٦۱ ،۳٥ ........................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪۲۲ ،۲۱ .................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۱٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺯﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﺩ‪۲۳۲ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٦۰ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ‪۱٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪۳۳ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۳۰ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪۲۱٥ ،۸۱ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۸٦ ،۷۰ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۲٤٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱۷٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۷٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪۱۲۲ ..................................Shutter‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪۱۲۲ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۲۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪۹۲ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۰ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪٤۰ ...............‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۸۸ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ‪۱٦٦ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ‪۲۲٤ ...........‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪۲۲٦ ....‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۷۹ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٥۳ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۳۸ ،۱۹ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪۱۱٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ‪۲۱٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪۱۲۳ ...........(FEB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪۲۰۹ ،۱۱٤ ،۸۰ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪۱۱۱ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ ‪٦۷ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۱٥۱ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪٦۳ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ‪۱۰٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪۹۰ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪۲۳٤ ..............‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪۱۱۷ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ )‪۹۷ ،٤۲ ........ (9‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪۱۳۸ ،۱۰۰ ،۳۹ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۳۳ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۷ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۲٦٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ‪٤۰ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ‪٦٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۸۳ ،۲۷ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۲٥۷ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪۱۰۲ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪۲۳۳ ،۱٥۲ ،۱۳۰ ........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫)ﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪۱۷٤ ،۱٥۲ ،۱٤۳ ،۱۹...............‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ‪۱۱٦ ......................(LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪۱۷۰ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۷۱ ،٦٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪۲٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ‪٦۰ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪۱۱۹ ........EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥۷ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪٤٦ ،۲۲ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪۹۲ .......................................... ICC‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۰۱ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲۱ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪۱۱۰ ...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪۱۱٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )‪۱۰٦ .......... (AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۸ ... shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۱۳٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۲۲ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۲۱۱ ،۱۰٤ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪٦۸ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۲۰٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۲۰٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪۲۳٥ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪٥۷ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۱۸۱ ...............................‬‬
‫‪۲۷٥‬‬
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
U.S.A.
CANON U.S.A. INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.
1-800-OK-CANON
CANADA
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada
1-800-OK-CANON
EUROPE,
AFRICA &
MIDDLE EAST
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), Italy
CANON Schweiz A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
Canon GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vienna, Austria
CANON España,S.A.
Av. De Europa,6 Alcobendas 28108 Madrid, Spain
CANON Portugal S.A.
Rua Alfredo da Silva,14 Alfragide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal
CENTRAL &
SOUTH AMERICA
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.
ASIA
CANON (China) Co., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea
OCEANIA
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
JAPAN
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of October 2009. For information on
the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this
date, contact any Canon Service Center.
CT1-1034-000
© CANON INC. 2009
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising